Contents

Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide PDF

1 of 1141
1 of 1141

Summary of Content for Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide PDF

Notice to Users 1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in whole or in part without written permission is prohibited. All rights reserved. This manual and the software described herein, in whole or in part, may not be reproduced, translated, or reduced to any machine-readable form without prior written approval.

SONY ELECTRONICS INC. PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ELECTRONICS INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF.

Sony Electronics Inc. reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice. The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement.

Sony, VAIO, VAIO Smart, i.Link, S-Link, and the VAIO logo are trademarks of Sony. Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation. K56flex is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc. and Rockwell International. All other trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners.

Safety Information

Owner's Record

The model number and serial number are located on the back of your Sony computer. Record the model and serial numbers in the space provided here. Refer to the model and serial number when you call your Sony Service Center.

Model Number:________________________

Serial Number:________________________

WARNING

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose your Sony computer to rain or moisture.

Never install modem or telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations

Never touch uninsulated telephone wire or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Avoid using the modem during an electrical storm.

Do not use the modem or a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

Regulatory Information

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,Page 1

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) that comply with FCC Class B limits may be attached to this computer product. Operation with non-compliant peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and television reception.

All cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded and grounded. Operation with cables, connected to peripherals, that are not shielded and grounded, may result in interference to radio and television reception.

FCC Part 68

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. The ringer equivalence number (REN) and the FCC registration number are printed on the modem board. If requested, this information must be supplied to the telephone company.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the phone line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN's, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

This modem uses the USOC RJ-11 telephone jack.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will, when practical, notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operations of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will notify you in advance, in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this modem, for repair or warranty information, please contact 1-888-4SONY-PC, or write to the Sony Customer Information Center, One Sony Drive, Park Ridge, NJ 07656.

This equipment cannot be used on telephone-company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.

Repair of the modem should be made only by a Sony Service Center or Sony authorized agent. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unlessPag 2

such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.

In order to program this information into your facsimile, see your fax software documentation.

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

Page 3

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 4

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 5

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 6

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 7

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 8

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 9

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 10

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 11

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 12

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 13

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 14

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 15

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 16

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 17

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 18

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 19

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 20

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 21

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 22

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 23

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 24

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 25

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 26

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 27

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 28

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 29

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 30

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 31

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 32

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 33

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 34

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 35

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 36

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 37

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 38

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 39

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 40

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 41

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 42

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 43

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 44

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 45

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 46

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 47

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 48

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 49

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 50

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 51

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 52

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 53

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 54

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 55

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 56

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 57

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 58

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 59

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 60

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 61

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 62

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 63

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 64

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 65

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 66

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 67

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 68

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 69

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 70

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 71

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 72

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 73

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 74

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 75

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 76

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 77

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 78

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 79

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 80

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 81

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 82

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 83

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 84

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 85

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 86

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 87

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 88

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 89

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 90

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 91

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 92

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 93

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 94

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 95

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 96

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 97

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 98

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 99

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 100

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 101

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 102

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 103

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 104

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 105

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 106

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 107

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 108

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 109

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 110

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 111

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 112

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 113

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 114

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 115

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 116

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 117

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 118

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 119

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 120

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 121

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 122

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 123

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 124

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 125

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 126

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 127

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 128

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 129

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 130

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 131

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 132

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 133

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 134

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 135

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 136

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 137

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 138

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 139

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 140

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 141

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 142

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 143

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 144

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 145

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 146

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 147

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 148

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 149

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 150

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 151

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 152

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 153

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 154

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 155

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 156

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 157

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 158

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 159

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 160

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 161

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 162

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 163

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 164

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 165

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 166

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 167

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 168

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 169

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 170

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 171

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 172

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 173

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 174

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 175

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 176

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 177

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 178

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 179

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 180

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 181

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 182

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 183

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 184

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 185

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 186

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 187

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 188

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 189

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 190

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 191

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 192

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 193

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 194

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 195

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 196

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 197

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 198

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 199

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 200

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 201

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 202

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 203

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 204

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 205

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 206

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 207

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 208

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 209

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 210

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 211

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 212

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 213

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 214

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 215

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 216

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 217

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 218

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 219

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 220

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 221

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 222

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 223

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 224

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 225

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 226

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 227

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 228

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 229

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 230

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 231

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 232

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 233

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 234

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 235

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 236

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 237

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 238

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 239

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 240

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 241

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 242

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 243

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 244

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 245

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 246

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 247

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 248

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 249

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 250

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 251

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 252

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 253

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 254

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 255

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 256

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 257

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 258

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 259

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 260

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 261

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 262

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 263

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 264

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 265

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 266

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 267

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 268

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 269

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 270

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 271

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 272

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 273

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 274

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 275

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 276

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 277

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 278

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 279

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 280

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 281

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 282

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 283

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 284

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 285

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 286

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 287

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 288

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 289

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 290

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 291

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 292

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 293

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 294

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 295

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 296

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 297

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 298

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 299

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 300

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 301

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 302

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 303

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 304

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 305

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 306

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 307

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 308

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 309

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 310

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 311

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 312

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 313

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 314

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 315

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 316

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 317

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 318

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 319

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 320

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 321

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 322

Read Me First

Welcome

Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

Features

For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.

Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.

VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.

Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.

S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.

i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.

S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.

Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.

50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.

Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.

Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.

VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.

Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.

Unpacking Your Computer

Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 323

Manuals

Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.

The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.

The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.

Recovery CDs

System Recovery CD(s)

Application Recovery CD(s)

Other

Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)

Packet containing special product offers

Software Library

The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:

Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0

Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead

Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia

Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 324

DVD Discs

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Back Panel Overview

The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.

Front Panel Overview

The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.

Page 325

For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.

Supplementary Information

You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.

Optimal DVD Performance

Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.

The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.

If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.

VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings

The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 326

S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser

S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)

S3 - MotorHead (Game)

S4 - Microsoft Works

S5 - Quicken Basic 98

S6 - Sony Help Center

All six buttons are reprogrammable.

Using The Standby Mode

To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.

Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).

Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.

2. Click the Power Management icon.

3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.

4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.

5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.

To Resume from Standby Mode

There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.

Press any key, such as the Enter key.

Tap the power switch on the front panel.

It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.

Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver

Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.

Restoring Outlook 98

For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.

If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 327

should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.

2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.

3. Click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.

5. Click the Add New Components button.

6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.

7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.

8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."

9. Click the Next button.

10. Click the Install Now button.

11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.

12. Click Yes to restart your computer.

Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook

If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.

When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.

The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.

If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.

Inserting Add-in Boards

Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.

Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors

For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

Connecting to i.LINK Ports

Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.

Page 328

Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images

You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.

If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.

For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:

1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.

2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.

3. Click OK to close the screen.

4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.

5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.

[Time base]

Time base - 29.97fps (required)

[Compress]

File type - AVI (required)

Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)

Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)

Quality (No control for this item)

Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)

Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)

Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)

Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)

[Output options]

Video - On (required)

Video Size - 720x480

Video VH Ratio - Off (required)

VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)

Audio - On (required)

Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)

Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)

Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 329

Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)

- Less than 30 frames (required)

Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)

Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)

- Less than 1.0 (required)

[Preview Option]

Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)

Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.

Using Alternate Browsers with America Online

To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:

1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.

2. Click the Internet icon.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.

5. Click OK.

Using DVgate Motion

When capturing images:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.

You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.

To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.

The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.

For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.

Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.

o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 330

When recording AVI files to tape:

Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.

o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.

To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.

You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.

Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.

DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.

In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.

If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.

Restoring Audio Drivers

When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.

Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output

Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.

For Answers to Your Software Questions

Sony Service Center

For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE

(Adobe Systems Incorporated)

Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT

America Online (America Online)

Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET

CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)

Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET

Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 331

Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)

Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)

Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)

Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)

Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1

hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.

Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)

Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day

SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)

Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT

Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II

Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB

Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD

DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1

Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2

Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay

Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)

Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port

Page 332

Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3

Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)

Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4

Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)

1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).

2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.

3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.

4 Certain restrictions apply

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.

1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.

1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.

Page 333

Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

About the User Guide

The User Guide offers a quick introduction and reference to your Sony computer.

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower shows you how to connect the standard components of your system--generally in under 15 minutes. This section also explains how to connect additional components, such as a printer, MIDI instrument, joystick, digital camera, and more.

Getting Help explains the support options available to you, shows you how to use the Sony Online Support service, and offers basic troubleshooting tips.

Computer Basics shows new computer users how to use a mouse, keyboard, DVD-ROM, and diskette drive.

Other Information provides facts and advice about using your computer.

Limited Warranty Statement provides your product warranty statement and explains how to extend your warranty for an additional nine months.

Page 334

Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.

About the User Guide

The User Guide offers a quick introduction and reference to your Sony computer.

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower shows you how to connect the standard components of your system--generally in under 15 minutes. This section also explains how to connect additional components, such as a printer, MIDI instrument, joystick, digital camera, and more.

Getting Help explains the support options available to you, shows you how to use the Sony Online Support service, and offers basic troubleshooting tips.

Computer Basics shows new computer users how to use a mouse, keyboard, DVD-ROM, and diskette drive.

Other Information provides facts and advice about using your computer.

Limited Warranty Statement provides your product warranty statement and explains how to extend your warranty for an additional nine months.

Page 335

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 336

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 337

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 338

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 339

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 340

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 341

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 342

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 343

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 344

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 345

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 346

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 347

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 348

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 349

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 350

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 351

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 352

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 353

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 354

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 355

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 356

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 357

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 358

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 359

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 360

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 361

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 362

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 363

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 364

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 365

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 366

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 367

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 368

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 369

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 370

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 371

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 372

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 373

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 374

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 375

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 376

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 377

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 378

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 379

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 380

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 381

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 382

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 383

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 384

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 385

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 386

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 387

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 388

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 389

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 390

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 391

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 392

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 393

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 394

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 395

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 396

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 397

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 398

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 399

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 400

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 401

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 402

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 403

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 404

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 405

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 406

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 407

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 408

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 409

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 410

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 411

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 412

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 413

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 414

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 415

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 416

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 417

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 418

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 419

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 420

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 421

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 422

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 423

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 424

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 425

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 426

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 427

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 428

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 429

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 430

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 431

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 432

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 433

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 434

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 435

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 436

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 437

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 438

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 439

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 440

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 441

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 442

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 443

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 444

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 445

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 446

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 447

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 448

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 449

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 450

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 451

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 452

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 453

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 454

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 455

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 456

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 457

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 458

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 459

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 460

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 461

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 462

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 463

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 464

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 465

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 466

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 467

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 468

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 469

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 470

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 471

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 472

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 473

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 474

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 475

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 476

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 477

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 478

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 479

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 480

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 481

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 482

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 483

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 484

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 485

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 486

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 487

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 488

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 489

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 490

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 491

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 492

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 493

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 494

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 495

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 496

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 497

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 498

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 499

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 500

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 501

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 502

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 503

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 504

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 505

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 506

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 507

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 508

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 509

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 510

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 511

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 512

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 513

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 514

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 515

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 516

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 517

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 518

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 519

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 520

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 521

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 522

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 523

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 524

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 525

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 526

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 527

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 528

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 529

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 530

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 531

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 532

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 533

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 534

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 535

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 536

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 537

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 538

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 539

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 540

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 541

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 542

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 543

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 544

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 545

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 546

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 547

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 548

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 549

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 550

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 551

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 552

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 553

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 554

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 555

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 556

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 557

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 558

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 559

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 560

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 561

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 562

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 563

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 564

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 565

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 566

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 567

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 568

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 569

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 570

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 571

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 572

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 573

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 574

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 575

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 576

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 577

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 578

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 579

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 580

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 581

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 582

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 583

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 584

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 585

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 586

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 587

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 588

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 589

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 590

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 591

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 592

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 593

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 594

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 595

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 596

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 597

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 598

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 599

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 600

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 601

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 602

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 603

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 604

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 605

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 606

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 607

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 608

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 609

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 610

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 611

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 612

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 613

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 614

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 615

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 616

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 617

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 618

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 619

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 620

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 621

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 622

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 623

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 624

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 625

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 626

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 627

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 628

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 629

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 630

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 631

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 632

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 633

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 634

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 635

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 636

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 637

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 638

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 639

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 640

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 641

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 642

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 643

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 644

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 645

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 646

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 647

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 648

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 649

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 650

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 651

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 652

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 653

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 654

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 655

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 656

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 657

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 658

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 659

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 660

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 661

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 662

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 663

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 664

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 665

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 666

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 667

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 668

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 669

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 670

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 671

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 672

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 673

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 674

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 675

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 676

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 677

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 678

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 679

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 680

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 681

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 682

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 683

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 684

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 685

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 686

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 687

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 688

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 689

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 690

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 691

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 692

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 693

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 694

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 695

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 696

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 697

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 698

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 699

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 700

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 701

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 702

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 703

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 704

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 705

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 706

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 707

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 708

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 709

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 710

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 711

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 712

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 713

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 714

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 715

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 716

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 717

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 718

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 719

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 720

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 721

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 722

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 723

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 724

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 725

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 726

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 727

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 728

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 729

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 730

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 731

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 732

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 733

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 734

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 735

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 736

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 737

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 738

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 739

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 740

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 741

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 742

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 743

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 744

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 745

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 746

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 747

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 748

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 749

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 750

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 751

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 752

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 753

Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.

Choosing a Location for Your Computer

Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:

Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.

Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.

Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.

Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.

Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.

Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 754

display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.

Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display

The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.

See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.

Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone

If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.

If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).

Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.

Page 755

1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.

3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.

Connecting the Optional Palmrest

The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.

1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.

2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.

3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.

Page 756

Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.

To remove the palmrest

1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.

2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.

3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.

Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse

Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.

2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.

Page 757

See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.

Connecting the Phone Line and Phone

You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.

In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.

There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.

The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .

1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.

2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.

Page 758

Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

Connecting the Power Cords

Follow these steps to connect the power cords.

1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.

2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.

3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.

Page 759

Connecting Peripherals

You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.

Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

S/PDIF equipped device*

Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.

Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.

Page 760

Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)

Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)

You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.

If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black

end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the

audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)

3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.

If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:

Page 761

1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.

If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.

2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of

the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio

splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.

3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .

Connecting a Printer

You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.

1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.

2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 762

See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument

You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.

Page 763

Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.

To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device

Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.

Page 764

See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S/PDIF device

Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.

Page 765

See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.

Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device

Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.

To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device

Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.

Page 766

See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.

Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device

You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.

Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.

Page 767

See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.

Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral

You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.

Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.

Page 768

See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.

Starting Your Computer

After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.

1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.

2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.

Page 769

See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.

After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.

Registering Windows 98

The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.

You must register Windows before you can use your computer.

The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.

1. Gathering information:

o Enter your name.

o Read and accept the License Agreement.

o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.

2. Windows setup:

o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.

3. Selecting your computer settings:

o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.

4. Learning about Windows:

o If you want, take the tour of Windows.

Registering Your Computer Page 770

Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:

Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.

Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.

You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.

On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.

Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.

1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.

2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.

3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.

4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.

The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.

Using the Standby Mode

When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.

To put the computer in standby mode

1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)

2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.

The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.

To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode

The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.

To take the computer out of standby mode

Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.

Standby Mode Indicators

You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.

Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.

In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.

Page 771

Shutting Down Your Computer

When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.

To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.

To shut down your computer

If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.

3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.

4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.

Respond to any prompts about saving documents.

5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.

6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.

Page 772

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 773

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 774

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 775

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 776

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 777

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 778

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 779

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 780

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 781

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 782

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 783

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 784

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 785

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 786

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 787

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 788

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 789

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 790

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 791

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 792

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 793

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 794

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 795

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 796

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 797

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 798

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 799

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 800

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 801

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 802

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 803

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 804

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 805

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 806

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 807

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 808

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 809

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 810

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 811

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 812

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 813

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 814

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 815

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 816

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 817

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 818

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 819

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 820

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 821

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 822

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 823

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 824

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 825

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 826

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 827

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 828

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 829

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 830

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 831

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 832

Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.

Starting VAIO Space

To start VAIO Space

Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.

The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:

VAIO Space Centers

There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:

Center Name Icon Contains Description

Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.

See Using the Software Center for details.

Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging

Page 833

DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.

See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.

Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.

See Using the Online Center for details. Tool

Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.

See Using the Tool Center for details.

Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.

See Using the Help Center for details.

Navigating through VAIO Space

To go to a center within VAIO Space

1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.

2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.

Page 834

Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.

VAIO Space Controls Button Function

Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.

Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.

Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).

Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).

Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.

Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.

Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.

Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.

Animates when a web page is loading.

Page 835

Using the Software Center

To launch the Software Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.

3. To start an application, click the icon.

Other Software Center Functions

Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.

Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)

Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click

Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click

(grayed out when unavailable)

Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click

(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.

Using the Audio-Video Center

The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:

Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.

Audio Includes the following players:

Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.

Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.

DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.

Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear

DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.

Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.

DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 836

Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack

Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.

Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.

Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.

Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.

DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).

For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.

Using the Online Center

To launch the Online Center

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.

Using the Tool Center

Using Tool Center Tools

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click the text of the category as described below.

Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.

Using the Help Center

To launch the Help Center: Page 837

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.

2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.

Exiting VAIO Space

To exit VAIO Space

Click the (Close) button.

Page 838

Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:

VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.

Calling SOS

The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:

Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.

Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.

Specify the access level for the CSR.

The CSR resolves the problem.

Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.

To place a call to SOS

1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.

2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.

Page 839

3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.

4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.

5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.

6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.

7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.

8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.

9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:

Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.

You can change the access level during your call to SOS.

If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.

When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.

Page 840

10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.

11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

My computer won't start

Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.

Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.

Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.

If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.

Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.

Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).

My computer "locks up"

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.

If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.

Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.

My software program "locks up" or crashes

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.

My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open

Make sure the computer is turned on.

Press the Eject button on the drive.

Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.

If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.

I cannot play a CD-ROM disc

Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 841

Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.

I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.

If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.

If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.

A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.

When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start

Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.

Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.

My speakers have no sound

Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.

If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.

If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.

If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.

If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.

Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.

If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.

My modem connection is slow

The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:

Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.

If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.

If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 842

If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.

My modem doesn't work

Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.

Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.

Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.

Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.

My microphone doesn't work

Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

My microphone is too sensitive to background noise

If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:

1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.

2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.

3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.

4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.

5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.

6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.

7. Close the Recording Control window.

My mouse doesn't work

Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:

o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.

o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.

o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.

o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.

o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.

My keyboard doesn't work

Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

I can't find the Windows taskbar

Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 843

Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.

See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.

Using the System Recovery CD(s)

You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.

Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).

The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.

The System Recovery utility gives you three options:

Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.

Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.

Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.

If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the System Recovery CD(s)

You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.

1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.

The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.

2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.

3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.

4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.

5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.

The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 844

Using the Application Recovery CD(s)

The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).

You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the Application Recovery CD(s)

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.

2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.

3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.

Page 845

Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:

VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.

Calling SOS

The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:

Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.

Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.

Specify the access level for the CSR.

The CSR resolves the problem.

Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.

To place a call to SOS

1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.

2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.

Page 846

3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.

4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.

5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.

6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.

7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.

8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.

9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:

Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.

You can change the access level during your call to SOS.

If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.

When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.

Page 847

10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.

11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

My computer won't start

Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.

Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.

Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.

If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.

Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.

Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).

My computer "locks up"

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.

If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.

Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.

My software program "locks up" or crashes

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.

My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open

Make sure the computer is turned on.

Press the Eject button on the drive.

Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.

If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.

I cannot play a CD-ROM disc

Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 848

Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.

I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.

If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.

If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.

A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.

When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start

Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.

Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.

My speakers have no sound

Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.

If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.

If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.

If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.

If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.

Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.

If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.

My modem connection is slow

The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:

Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.

If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.

If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 849

If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.

My modem doesn't work

Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.

Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.

Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.

Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.

My microphone doesn't work

Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

My microphone is too sensitive to background noise

If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:

1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.

2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.

3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.

4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.

5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.

6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.

7. Close the Recording Control window.

My mouse doesn't work

Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:

o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.

o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.

o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.

o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.

o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.

My keyboard doesn't work

Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

I can't find the Windows taskbar

Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 850

Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.

See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.

Using the System Recovery CD(s)

You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.

Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).

The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.

The System Recovery utility gives you three options:

Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.

Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.

Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.

If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the System Recovery CD(s)

You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.

1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.

The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.

2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.

3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.

4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.

5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.

The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 851

Using the Application Recovery CD(s)

The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).

You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the Application Recovery CD(s)

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.

2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.

3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.

Page 852

Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:

VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.

Calling SOS

The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:

Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.

Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.

Specify the access level for the CSR.

The CSR resolves the problem.

Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.

To place a call to SOS

1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.

2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.

Page 853

3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.

4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.

5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.

6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.

7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.

8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.

9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:

Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.

You can change the access level during your call to SOS.

If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.

When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.

Page 854

10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.

11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

My computer won't start

Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.

Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.

Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.

If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.

Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.

Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).

My computer "locks up"

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.

If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.

Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.

My software program "locks up" or crashes

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.

My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open

Make sure the computer is turned on.

Press the Eject button on the drive.

Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.

If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.

I cannot play a CD-ROM disc

Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 855

Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.

I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.

If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.

If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.

A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.

When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start

Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.

Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.

My speakers have no sound

Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.

If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.

If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.

If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.

If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.

Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.

If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.

My modem connection is slow

The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:

Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.

If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.

If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 856

If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.

My modem doesn't work

Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.

Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.

Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.

Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.

My microphone doesn't work

Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

My microphone is too sensitive to background noise

If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:

1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.

2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.

3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.

4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.

5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.

6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.

7. Close the Recording Control window.

My mouse doesn't work

Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:

o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.

o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.

o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.

o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.

o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.

My keyboard doesn't work

Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

I can't find the Windows taskbar

Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 857

Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.

See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.

Using the System Recovery CD(s)

You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.

Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).

The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.

The System Recovery utility gives you three options:

Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.

Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.

Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.

If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the System Recovery CD(s)

You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.

1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.

The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.

2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.

3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.

4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.

5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.

The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 858

Using the Application Recovery CD(s)

The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).

You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the Application Recovery CD(s)

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.

2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.

3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.

Page 859

Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:

VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.

Calling SOS

The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:

Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.

Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.

Specify the access level for the CSR.

The CSR resolves the problem.

Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.

To place a call to SOS

1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.

2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.

Page 860

3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.

4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.

5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.

6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.

7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.

8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.

9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:

Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.

You can change the access level during your call to SOS.

If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.

When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.

Page 861

10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.

11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

My computer won't start

Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.

Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.

Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.

If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.

Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.

Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).

My computer "locks up"

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.

If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.

Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.

My software program "locks up" or crashes

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.

My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open

Make sure the computer is turned on.

Press the Eject button on the drive.

Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.

If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.

I cannot play a CD-ROM disc

Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 862

Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.

I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.

If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.

If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.

A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.

When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start

Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.

Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.

My speakers have no sound

Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.

If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.

If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.

If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.

If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.

Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.

If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.

My modem connection is slow

The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:

Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.

If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.

If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 863

If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.

My modem doesn't work

Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.

Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.

Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.

Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.

My microphone doesn't work

Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

My microphone is too sensitive to background noise

If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:

1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.

2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.

3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.

4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.

5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.

6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.

7. Close the Recording Control window.

My mouse doesn't work

Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:

o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.

o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.

o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.

o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.

o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.

My keyboard doesn't work

Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

I can't find the Windows taskbar

Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 864

Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.

See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.

Using the System Recovery CD(s)

You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.

Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).

The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.

The System Recovery utility gives you three options:

Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.

Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.

Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.

If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the System Recovery CD(s)

You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.

1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.

The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.

2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.

3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.

4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.

5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.

The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 865

Using the Application Recovery CD(s)

The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).

You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the Application Recovery CD(s)

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.

2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.

3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.

Page 866

Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:

VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.

Calling SOS

The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:

Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.

Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.

Specify the access level for the CSR.

The CSR resolves the problem.

Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.

To place a call to SOS

1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.

2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.

Page 867

3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.

4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.

5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.

6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.

7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.

8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.

9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:

Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.

You can change the access level during your call to SOS.

If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.

When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.

Page 868

10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.

11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.

Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

My computer won't start

Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.

Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.

Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.

If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.

Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.

Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).

My computer "locks up"

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.

If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.

Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.

My software program "locks up" or crashes

Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.

Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.

My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open

Make sure the computer is turned on.

Press the Eject button on the drive.

Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.

If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.

I cannot play a CD-ROM disc

Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 869

Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.

I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc

If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.

If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.

If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.

A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.

When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start

Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.

Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.

My speakers have no sound

Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.

If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.

If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.

If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.

If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.

Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.

If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.

My modem connection is slow

The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:

Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.

If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.

If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 870

If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.

My modem doesn't work

Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.

Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.

Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.

Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.

My microphone doesn't work

Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.

My microphone is too sensitive to background noise

If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:

1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.

2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.

3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.

4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.

5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.

6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.

7. Close the Recording Control window.

My mouse doesn't work

Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:

o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.

o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.

o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.

o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.

o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.

My keyboard doesn't work

Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.

I can't find the Windows taskbar

Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 871

Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.

See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.

Using the System Recovery CD(s)

You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.

Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).

The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.

The System Recovery utility gives you three options:

Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.

Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.

Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.

If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the System Recovery CD(s)

You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.

1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.

The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.

2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.

3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.

4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.

5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.

The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 872

Using the Application Recovery CD(s)

The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).

You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).

To use the Application Recovery CD(s)

1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.

2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.

3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.

Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.

Page 873

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 874

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 875

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 876

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 877

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 878

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 879

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 880

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 881

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 882

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 883

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 884

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 885

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 886

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 887

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 888

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 889

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 890

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 891

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 892

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 893

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 894

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 895

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 896

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 897

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 898

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 899

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 900

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 901

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 902

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 903

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 904

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 905

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 906

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 907

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 908

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 909

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 910

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 911

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 912

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 913

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 914

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 915

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 916

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 917

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 918

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 919

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 920

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 921

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 922

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 923

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 924

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 925

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 926

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 927

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 928

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 929

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 930

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 931

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 932

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 933

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 934

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 935

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 936

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 937

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 938

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 939

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 940

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 941

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 942

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 943

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 944

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 945

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 946

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 947

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 948

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 949

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 950

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 951

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 952

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 953

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 954

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 955

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 956

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 957

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 958

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 959

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 960

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 961

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 962

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 963

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 964

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 965

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 966

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 967

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 968

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 969

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 970

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 971

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 972

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 973

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 974

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 975

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 976

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 977

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 978

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 979

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 980

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 981

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 982

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 983

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 984

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 985

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 986

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 987

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 988

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 989

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 990

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 991

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 992

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 993

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 994

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 995

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 996

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 997

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 998

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 999

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 1000

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 1001

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1002

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 1003

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 1004

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1005

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 1006

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 1007

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 1008

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 1009

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 1010

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1011

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1012

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1013

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 1014

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 1015

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 1016

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1017

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 1018

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 1019

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1020

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 1021

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 1022

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 1023

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 1024

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 1025

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1026

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1027

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1028

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 1029

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 1030

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 1031

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1032

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 1033

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 1034

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1035

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 1036

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 1037

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 1038

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 1039

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 1040

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1041

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1042

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1043

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 1044

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 1045

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 1046

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1047

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 1048

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 1049

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1050

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 1051

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 1052

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 1053

Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.

Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

Inserting an Add-in Board

You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.

Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.

To insert an add-in board

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.

5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.

Page 1054

6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).

Page 1055

7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Adding Memory

In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.

For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).

To install memory

Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .

1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.

2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.

3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1056

You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.

4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.

5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.

6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.

7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .

8. Align the DIMM over the socket.

To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.

9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.

10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.

11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.

12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

Replacing the Lithium Battery

After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.

To replace the lithium battery

1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1057

3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.

4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.

5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.

There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.

6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.

The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.

7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.

8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.

9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.

Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive

Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.

Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.

1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1058

for configuration instructions).

2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.

3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.

5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).

6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.

7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.

Page 1059

8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.

9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.

Page 1060

10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.

11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.

12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.

13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.

Page 1061

14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.

15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.

16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.

17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.

18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.

Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.

Removing the Left-Side Panel

To remove the left-side panel

1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

2. Slide the panel back until it stops.

3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1062

Removing the Bottom Panel

To remove the bottom panel

1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.

Page 1063

Removing the Front Panel

To remove the front panel

1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.

2. Slide the CD tray forward.

3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.

4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.

5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.

Page 1064

Detaching the Diskette Drive

To detach the diskette drive

1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Pull the diskette drive forward.

If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1065

Replacing the Diskette Drive

To replace the diskette drive

1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.

3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.

Replacing the Bottom Panel

To replace the bottom panel

1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.

2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.

Page 1066

Replacing the Front Panel

To replace the front panel

1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.

2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.

3. Close the CD tray. Page 1067

Replacing the Left-Side Panel

To replace the left-side panel

1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.

2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.

Page 1068

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1069

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1070

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1071

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1072

Page 1073

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1074

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1075

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1076

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1077

Page 1078

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1079

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1080

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1081

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1082

Page 1083

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1084

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1085

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1086

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1087

Page 1088

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1089

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1090

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1091

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1092

Page 1093

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1094

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1095

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1096

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1097

Page 1098

Computer Basics

Using the Keyboard

Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.

Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.

The keyboard also has three lights:

Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1099

Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.

Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons

You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.

2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.

Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.

3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.

4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.

Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.

5. Close the Customization dialog box.

Using the Mouse

Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.

Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.

Page 1100

Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use

You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).

To set up the mouse for left-hand use

1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.

2. Point to Settings.

3. Click Control Panel.

4. Double-click the Mouse icon.

5. Click the Buttons tab.

6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.

7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.

Using the DVD-ROM Drive

To use the drive

1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.

2. Place the disc in the tray.

Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.

3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.

Page 1101

To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.

Using the Diskette Drive

Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.

To use the diskette drive

1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.

2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.

3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.

Page 1102

Page 1103

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1104

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1105

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1106

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1107

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1108

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1109

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1110

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1111

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1112

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1113

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1114

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1115

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1116

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1117

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1118

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1119

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1120

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1121

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1122

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1123

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1124

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1125

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1126

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1127

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1128

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1129

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1130

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1131

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1132

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1133

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1134

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1135

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1136

Other Information

Notes on Use

On the Power Source

Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.

The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.

Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.

Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.

You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.

If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.

Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.

Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.

To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.

Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.

The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.

Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.

Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.

On Disposal of the Lithium Battery

Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.

The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1137

Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.

On Handling

Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.

Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On Installation

Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:

o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts

o Direct sunlight

o Excessive dust

o Mechanical vibration or shock

o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded

o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)

o High humidity, moisture, or rain

Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.

Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.

The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.

Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.

Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.

Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.

Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.

Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).

If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.

On Moisture Condensation

If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1138

problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.

On Upgrading the System

The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.

Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.

When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.

On Using the Hard Disk Drive

Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.

Do not move the computer during operation.

Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.

Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.

On Handling Diskettes

Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.

Keep diskettes away from magnets.

Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.

On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Do not touch the surface of the disc.

Do not drop or bend the disc.

On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs

Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.

For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.

If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.

Page 1139

Limited Warranty Statement The limited warranty on your VAIO MicroTower covers parts and labor against defects in material or workmanship for a period of three months from the original date of purchase. You can extend the warranty period for an additional nine months by registering your computer. See Registering Your Computer. Once you register your computer, the limited warranty period is twelve months from the original date of purchase.

SONY ELECTRONICS INC. ("SONY") warrants this computer hardware product ("the Product") against defects in material or workmanship as follows:

Labor: For a period of ninety (90) calendar days from the original date of purchase from SONY or a SONY authorized reseller, SONY will repair defects in the Product at no charge, or pay the associated labor charges to a SONY authorized personal computer service facility. The ninety (90) day warranty period is extendible only to the original purchaser, for an additional period of nine (9) months, for a total of twelve (12) months from date of purchase when the Product is registered electronically. After the applicable period you must pay for all labor charges.

Parts: For a period of ninety (90) calendar days from the original date of purchase from SONY or a SONY authorized reseller, SONY will supply, at no charge, new or rebuilt, at SONY's option, replacement parts in exchange for defective parts. Any replacement parts will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) calendar days from installation by SONY's authorized personal computer service facility, whichever is longer. The ninety (90) day warranty period is extendible only to the original purchaser, for an additional period of nine (9) months, for a total of twelve (12) months from date of purchase when the Product is registered electronically. All defective parts replaced under this Limited Warranty will become the property of SONY.

This Limited Warranty covers only the hardware components packaged with the Product. It does not cover technical assistance for hardware or software usage and it does not cover any software products whether or not contained in the Product; any such software is provided "AS IS" unless expressly provided for in any enclosed software limited warranty. Please refer to the End User License Agreements included with the Product for your obligations with respect to the software.

This Limited Warranty is non-transferable.

Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale (which is evidence that the Product is within the warranty period) must be presented to obtain warranty service. In addition, if replacement parts are required and you wish to receive the most expedient service available, you will be required to provide SONY with a credit card authorization to bill your credit card in the event you fail to return the original parts in the postage-paid envelope we provide. The credit card will only be charged for SONY's list price for the part if the part has not been returned within thirty days.

If you purchased the Product in the United States and the Product is located in the United States, you may be entitled to on-site repair service during the warranty period, subject to certain restrictions. In all instances, however, prior to an on-site service call being provided, you must communicate with Sony sufficiently to allow it to perform initial diagnostics of your Product. Please contact SONY as set forth below for further information.

If you do not qualify for on-site warranty service or choose not to take advantage of any applicable on-site warranty service, you must take the Product, or deliver the Product freight prepaid, in either its original package or packaging providing the Product with a degree of protection equivalent to that of the original packaging, to any SONY authorized personal computer service facility. Please contact SONY as set forth below for further information.

With respect to all service provided, it is your responsibility to backup the contents of your hard drive, including any data you have stored or software you have installed on the hard drive. It is likely that the contents of your hard drive will be lost or reformatted in the course of service and SONY will not be responsible for any damage to or loss of any programs, data or other information stored on any media or any part of any Product serviced hereunder.

IF DURING THE REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT THE CONTENTS OF THE HARD DRIVE ARE ALTERED, DELETED, OR IN ANY WAY MODIFIED, SONY IS NOT RESPONSBILE WHATSOEVER. YOUR PRODUCTPage 1140

WILL BE RETURNED TO YOU CONFIGURED AS ORIGINALLY PURCHASED (SUBJECT TO AVAILABILITY OF SOFTWARE).

Be sure to remove all third party hardware, software, features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not warranted by SONY prior to sending the product to SONY for service. SONY is not liable for any loss or damage to these items.

This Limited Warranty does not cover any consumable items (such as batteries) supplied with this Product; cosmetic damages; damage or loss to any software programs, data, or removable storage media; or damage due to (1) acts of God, accident, misuse, abuse, negligence, commercial use or modifications of this Product; (2) improper operation or maintenance of this Product; (3) connection to improper voltage supply; or (4) attempted repair by any party other than a SONY authorized personal computer service facility. This Limited Warranty does not apply when the malfunction results from the use of this Product in conjunction with accessories, products or ancillary or peripheral equipment, or where it is determined by SONY that there is no fault with this Product itself. This Limited Warranty is valid only in the United States of America.

This Limited Warranty is invalid if the factory applied serial number has been altered or removed from the Product.

Repair or replacement of defective parts or hardware as provided under this Limited Warranty is the exclusive remedy of the consumer. SONY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THIS PRODUCT. SUCH DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, DOWN TIME AND PURCHASER'S TIME. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights which vary from state to state.

Technical Support: Although technical support is not provided free of charge under this Limited Warranty, SONY has established a telephone number for technical support. Charges may apply for technical support, unless and to the extent that free technical support for a limited period is provided in writing as a feature of your Product. Prior to placing your call, please have available the model and serial number for your Product, date of purchase, a list of all options installed in your Product and a detailed description of the problem.

For Product support, on-line knowledge base, frequently asked questions, and free updates via the Internet: http:

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the PCV-E308DS Sony works, you can view and download the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Guide for Sony PCV-E308DS as well as other Sony manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Sony PCV-E308DS. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.